2013 buick encore owner manual m

Black plate (1,1)Buick Encore Owner Manual - 2013 - crc - 1/8/13

2013 Buick Encore Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-31

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-23Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-34Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


2013 Buick Encore Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, and ENCORE aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for BuickMotor Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22789122 B Second Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

About Driving the VehicleAs with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure toread the driving guidelines in thismanual in the section called “Drivingand Operating” and specificallyDriver Behavior on page 9-2,Driving Environment on page 9-2,and Vehicle Design on page 9-2.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-17Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-6.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-4.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.

4. Driver Information Center (DIC)Display. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

6. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9-28/StabiliTrak®

System on page 9-30.

Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-29.

7. Infotainment Display.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

9. AM-FM Radio on page 7-7.

10. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1.

11. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-5.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4.

12. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

13. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-14.

14. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1.

15. Cruise Control on page 9-32.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-34 (IfEquipped).

16. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

17. Horn on page 5-3.

18. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

19. Ignition Positions onpage 9-15.

20. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8-3 (If Equipped).

21. Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-36 (If Equipped).

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9-40 (IfEquipped).

22. Power Outlets on page 5-6.

23. Auxiliary Input Jack. SeeAuxiliary Devices onpage 7-13.

USB Port. See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-13.

24. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-23.

25. Safety Locks on page 2-7.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 30 m(98 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

K : Press to unlock the driver door,all doors or, if equipped, a lockingfuel door. Hazard warning flasherswill flash twice.

Q : Press to lock all doors or, ifequipped, a locking fuel door.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

7 : If equpped, press and holdbriefly to initiate vehicle locator.Press and hold for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. Press again to cancel thepanic alarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ forseveral seconds or until the turnsignal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, to lock the door,

use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.

. From the outside, turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press K or Q on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2-7.

LiftgateTo lock or unlock the liftgate frominside, press Q or K on the powerdoor locks. See Power Door Lockson page 2-7.

To lock or unlock the liftgate fromoutside, press Q or K on theRemote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.


1-6 In Brief

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad in the pull cup under the licenseplate and lift manually.

See Liftgate on page 2-8.

Windows

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise it. See PowerWindows on page 2-14.

The switches work when the vehicleis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-19.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Lumbar Adjustment

If available, press the front or rear ofthe switch to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the switchwhen the desired level of support isreached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Seat Shown, Power SeatSimilar

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


1-8 In Brief

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

Memory Features

If available, the MEM, “1,” and “2”buttons on the outboard side of thedriver seat are used to manuallysave and recall the driver seat andoutside mirror positions. Thesemanually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.

See Memory Seats on page 3-6 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats on page 3-10.

Heated Seats

If equipped, the controls are on theclimate control panel. The enginemust be running to operate theheated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.


In Brief 1-9

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-14.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-16.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-43.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-29 for important information.


1-10 In Brief

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-13.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glare

from the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-13.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.


In Brief 1-11

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner above the rear seats.

9 : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : When the button is returned tothe middle position, the lamps turnon automatically when a door isopened.

R : Press to turn on the dome lamps.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are in the overheadconsole.

# or$ : Press to turn each lampon or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6-5 orCourtesy Lamps on page 6-5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic lamp control offor on again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.


1-12 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, sidemarker lamps, andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2. Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

b : Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3 andRear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5-4.


In Brief 1-13

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.

Climate Control System

1. Temperature Control

2. Air Delivery Modes

3. Fan Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Conditioning

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped).


1-14 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

English Shown, Metric Similar

1. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls


4. Heated Steering Wheel (IfEquipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Air Conditioning

7. Fan Controls


9. Defrost

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-3 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual Mode).


In Brief 1-15

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the top of the shiftlever to upshift, or push the −(minus) end of the button todownshift.

See Manual Mode on page 9-25.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O /VOL: Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween AM, FM, or XM (IfEquipped).

TUNE/MENU: Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

s © or ¨\ : Press to seek theprevious or next station or track.

Buttons 1–6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7-4.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1–6 for more thantwo seconds.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7-7.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings orpress H.

2. Select the desired feature.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.


1-16 In Brief

4. Press the center of the TUNE/MENU knob to select the nextnumber.

5. To save and return to the Timeand Date Settings menu, press/ BACK at any time or press theTUNE/MENU knob afteradjusting the value.

6. Repeat steps 2–5 for theremaining features.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Select Set Time Format.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

4. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect display format.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB drives may beconnected, depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-13.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7-16.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g : For vehicles with Bluetooth,OnStar, press to interact with thosesystems. See Bluetooth onpage 7-16, OnStar Overview onpage 14-1, or the infotainmentmanual.


In Brief 1-17

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press the thumbwheelinward to change the audio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.There is also information on settingsand downloadable applications (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are on the turn signal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed.

2. wx : Turn the band to scrollthrough the menu items.

3. MENU: Press to display the DICmenus. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the RVC displays a viewof the area behind the vehicle whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). The display will appearon the radio screen.

To clean the camera lens above thelicense plate, rinse it with water andwipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-38.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA) usessensors on the front and rearbumpers to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).UFRPA uses audio beeps to providedistance and system information.


1-18 In Brief

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'sfront and rear bumpers clean toensure proper operation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-36 for more information.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outleton the center stack below theclimate control. This outlet ispowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-19.

See Power Outlets on page 5-6.

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of switch (1) to open orclose the sunroof.

Vent: Press and hold the front orrear of switch (2) to vent or closethe sunroof.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure.If problems persist, see your dealer.

See Sunroof on page 2-16.


In Brief 1-19

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the center

stack. i illuminates in theinstrument cluster and theappropriate message isdisplayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9-28.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press andhold g until g and i illuminatein the instrument cluster. Theappropriate message will displayin the DIC.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on when the vehicle speedexceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-30.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.


1-20 In Brief

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-43.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message when it isnecessary to change the engine oiland filter.

Remember, the oil life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the oil life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Press the MENU button to showRemaining Oil Life on thedisplay. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaininguseful life. If 99% is displayed,that means that 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

2. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, press the SET/CLRbutton while the oil life display isactive. After a few seconds,there will be a single chime andthe oil life will be reset to 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.


In Brief 1-21

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0818

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13-7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13-11.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


1-22 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the key release button on theRKE transmitter to extend the keyblade. Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

The key code is stamped on the keynumber plate and can be used tomake new keys at any dealer. Storethis information in a safe placeoutside the vehicle.

If it becomes difficult to turn the keyin the ignition, inspect the key bladefor debris. Periodically clean with abrush or pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13-7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13-11.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.



. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter may work up to30 m (98 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doorsor, if equipped, a locking fuel door.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote Lock/Unlock/Start” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Unlocked Door AntiLock Out is enabled through vehiclepersonalization, all doors will lockand then the driver door will unlock.

See “Remote Lock/Unlock/Start”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-9.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door, all doors or, if equipped,a locking fuel door. See “RemoteLock/Unlock/Start” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

The hazard warning flashers willflash twice and/or the horn maysound to indicate unlocking. See“Remote Lock/Unlock/Start” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-9.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): If equipped, press and holdbriefly to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times.



Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thekey is placed in the ignition andturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped, press Q and then press

and hold/ to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-5.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

1. Extend the key blade and openthe battery cover on the back ofthe transmitter by prying with afinger.

2. Remove the used battery bypushing on the battery andsliding it toward the key blade.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.



Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If thevehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start. SeeHeated Front Seats on page 3-8.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ forseveral seconds or until the turnsignal lamps flash. The turnsignal lamps flashing confirmsthe request to remote start thevehicle has been received.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.



Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or if the key is in thevehicle (keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside, to lock the door,

use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.



. From the outside, turn the keytoward the front or rear of thevehicle, or press K or Q on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

Power door locks features can beprogrammed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

The doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of P (Park).

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door Unlock

The doors will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park).

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Safety Locks

The rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle. Thesafety lock switch is on the centerstack.



Press { to activate the rear doorsafety locks. The indicator light inthe switch will illuminate.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

If an inside rear door handle ispulled when the safety lock isactivated, that door will remainlocked and the indicator light mayflash. Release the handle, thendeactivate the safety locks to allowthe door to open from the inside.

Doors

Liftgate

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-22.

Notice: To avoid damage to theliftgate or liftgate glass, makesure the area above and behindthe liftgate is clear beforeopening it.

To lock or unlock the liftgate frominside, press Q or K on the powerdoor locks. See Power Door Lockson page 2-7.



To lock or unlock the liftgate fromoutside, press Q or K on theRKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad in the pull cup below the licenseplate and lift manually.

To close the liftgate, push from thecenter to ensure that it fully latches.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemIf equipped with an anti-theft alarmsystem, the indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, shows the status of thesystem.

Arming the System

1. Close all doors, the hood, andthe liftgate.

2. Lock the vehicle using thetransmitter or the power doorlock button with the door open.The indicator light on theinstrument panel should comeon and flash for about30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, or if the Qbutton on the transmitter ispressed twice, the alarm systemwill arm, and the indicator lightwill begin to slowly flash to showthat the alarm is operating.

If any door or the hood is openedwithout first unlocking with thetransmitter, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

The theft-deterrent alarm system willnot activate if the doors are lockedwith the key.



Disarming the System

To disarm the system, either unlockthe doors using the transmitter,or start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the

transmitter after all occupantshave left the vehicle and alldoors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with thetransmitter. Unlocking the driverdoor with the backup key will notdisarm the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing K onthe transmitter, or start the vehiclewith a recognized transmitter in thevehicle. The alarm will not stop ifyou unlock the driver door withthe key.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the horn chirpsthree times, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the system wasarmed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.



If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

If equipped with folding mirrors andheated mirrors, see Folding Mirrorson page 2-12 and Heated Mirrors onpage 2-12.



Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

These mirrors can be folded inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThis vehicle has heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1.

Blind Spot MirrorsThe blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upperand outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind your



vehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have areverse tilt feature. This feature tiltsthe outside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature and theindicator light come on when thevehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows. The switches work whenthe vehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-19.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise it.



Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

If equipped, a window with theexpress-up/down feature can beraised or lowered without holdingthe switch. Press or pull the windowswitch fully and release it to activatethe express feature. The expressmode can be canceled by pressingor pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-19.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditions likesevere icing, the window will stopand open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.

Rear Window Lockout

The rear window lockout featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Pressv to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. Theindicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv again to deactivate thelockout switch.



Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow.

Close the mirror cover when driving.

If equipped, the vanity mirror lampcomes on when opening the mirrorcover.

Roof

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.

Open/Close: Press and hold thefront or rear of switch (1) to open orclose the sunroof.

Vent: Press and hold the front orrear of switch (2) to vent or closethe sunroof.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof, fully press and release thefront or rear of switch (1) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof fromclosing at the point of theobstruction. The sunroof thenreturns to the full-open position.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-34Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-40Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-51


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Front Seats

The front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.

Lumbar Adjustment

If available, press the front or rear ofthe switch to increase or decreaselumbar support. Release the switchwhen the desired level of support isreached.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

Manual Seat Shown, Power SeatSimilar

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.


2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

If available, the MEM, “1,” and “2”buttons on the outboard side of thedriver seat are used to manuallysave and recall the driver seat andoutside mirror positions. Thesemanually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andoutside mirrors to the desireddriving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”



Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the Button Memorypositions, press and hold “1” or “2.”The driver seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored tothose buttons when pressed.Releasing “1” or “2” before thestored positions are reached stopsthe recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions

The RKE memory feature can recallthe driver seat and outside mirrorsto previously stored RKE Memorypositions when entering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is placed inOFF, the positions of the driver seatand outside mirrors areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions andsettings are called RKE Memorypositions and may be different thanthe previously mentioned ButtonMemory positions saved to the“1” or “2” buttons.

To recall, press K on the RKEtransmitter and open the driver door.If the driver door is already open,press K on the RKE transmitter toactivate the recall. The driver seatand outside mirrors will move to thepreviously saved RKE Memorypositions.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby opening the driver door andpressing the RKE transmitter Kbutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate therecall.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.



To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Front Seat Armrest

There is an armrest on the inboardside of the driver seat. To raise orlower the armrest, push up or pulldown on the armrest.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If equipped, the controls are on theclimate control panel. The enginemust be running to operate theheated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.



The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the heated seatcontrols to use the heated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated seat indicator lights onthe control do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatbackfolds flat.

{ WARNING

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3-25 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

{ WARNING

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint all theway. See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

2. Move the seat as far back aspossible. See Seat Adjustmenton page 3-3.



3. Lift the lever fully and fold theseatback forward.


4. Continue lowering the seatbackuntil it is completely folded andlocks in place.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the lever fully to unlock theseatback. Then, raise theseatback and push it rearwarduntil it re-engages.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING


Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

Notice: Folding the rear seatbackprior to tilting the seat cushionforward may damage the rearseat. Always tilt the rear seatcushion forward before foldingthe seatback.



To fold a seatback down:

1. Make sure the floor area in frontof the rear seats is clear.

2. Fully lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

3. Slide the front seats forward andplace the front seatbacks in theupright position. See SeatAdjustment on page 3-3 andReclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

4. Pull the strap on the front edgeof the rear seat cushion torelease the cushion. Tilt the seatcushion forward toward the frontof the vehicle.

The seat cushion must be tiltedforward before the seatback isfolded down. Otherwise, theseatback will not fold downproperly.

Rear Seat with Retainer Hook onthe Seatback

5. Make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer hook on top of theseatback, if equipped.

Rear Seat with Retainer Hook onthe Seatback

6. Reach under the belt and pullthe lever on top of the seatbackto unlock the seatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.



7. Fold the seatback forwardand down.

Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim

8. Place the outboard safety belt inthe safety belt clip (if equipped)on the side trim of the vehicle.

9. Repeat Steps 1–8 for the otherseatback and seat cushion,if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



To return the rear seatback to thenormal seating position:

Safety Belt Clip on Side Trim

1. Remove the outboard safety beltfrom the safety belt clip (ifequipped) on the side trim of thevehicle.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward to lock it in place. A tabnear the seatback lever retractswhen the seatback is locked inplace.

Make sure the safety belts arenot pinched by the seatbacklocking mechanism.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, let thebelt go back all the way andstart again. If the safety belt isstill locked, try again after pullingthe seat cushion out.

3. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

4. Return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position and push downon the front part of the seatcushion until it latches.

Make sure the safety belts andsafety belt buckles are nottrapped under the seat cushionand are properly positionedfor use.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for the otherseatback and seat cushion,if necessary.

If additional cargo space is notneeded, the seatbacks should bekept in the upright, locked position.



Rear Seat Armrest

The rear seat has an armrest in thecenter of the seatback. Lower thearmrest to access the cupholders.

To fold, lift the armrest up and pushit rearward until it is flush with theseatback.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-11.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-35 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-37.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

The rear center safety belt canonly be withdrawn from theretractor if the seatback is in theupright locked position.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-21.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderbut not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to but notcontacting the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-15.

To move the shoulder belt heightadjuster down, push down on therelease button and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. Youcan move the height adjuster up bypushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-22.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Safety belt comfort guides areavailable through your dealer.

To install the adjustable comfortguide to the seatback and thesafety belt:

1. Locate the anchorage loop onthe rear outboard seatback, nearthe top.

2. Attach the adjustable comfortguide to the anchor loop bythreading the hook throughthe loop.



3. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

4. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

5. The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorter bysqueezing both ends of theplastic adjuster and pulling onthe elastic cord or the guide.

6. Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck.Improper comfort guideadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



7. Buckle and position the safetybelt as described previously inthis section. Make sure that theshoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Un-hook the guide from the loop onthe seat. Store the guide in aconvenient place like the glove boxfor the next time it is needed.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-11.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-22.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-12.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-26.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in the

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3-35 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3-37.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.



Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The second row seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the sides ofthe rear seatback closest tothe door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and



whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal impacts that exceed apredetermined deploymentthreshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront passenger. The vehicle hasseat-mounted side impact airbagsfor the second row outboardpassengers. The vehicle hasroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3-23. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbagsare intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact. Inaddition, these roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate during a rolloveror in a severe frontal impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck or

if the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side, or in a severe frontalimpact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-25.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-26.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-25.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.



The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn thehazard warning flashers on, andshut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate. You can lock thedoors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-19 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-19.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.



United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and knee

airbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. A front outboard passenger seatis occupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-48 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3-51.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle, andcheck with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant



If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position forone minute after the on indicatoris lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-16.



{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system can

also be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, overhead console,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

If the vehicle has rollover roof‐railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-52 forimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle

is modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices (U.S.and Canada) on page 13-5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13-5.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3-25. See your dealer forservice.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-12.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-16. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-16.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-43.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-29 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.



Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the trim near theanchor.

The top tether anchors are on theback of the rear seatbacks. Be sureto use an anchor on the same sideof the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-41 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-41.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.



1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

When installing arear-facing child restraint, itmay be necessary to movethe front seat forward toproperly install the childrestraint per the childrestraint manufacturerinstructions. See SeatAdjustment on page 3-3.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Remove the cargo coverbefore installing the toptether. Place the cargo

cover on the floor of thecargo area. The cargocover should remain offwhile the top tether isin use.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, route thetether over the seatback.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestraint and you are usinga single tether, raise thehead restraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and in between thehead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestraint and you are usinga dual tether, raise the headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestraint and around thehead restraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,



see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-43 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-41.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard second row seatingpositions, remove the safety beltfrom the guide. Do not securethe child restraint with the safetybelt routed through the guide.

When installing a rear-facingchild restraint, it may benecessary to move the front seatforward to properly install thechild restraint per the childrestraint manufacturerinstructions.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-41.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-29 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-43 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-43 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-43 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

Pull the handle to open.

Push the button to open.


4-2 Storage

Cupholders

If equipped, pull the rear seatarmrest down to access.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, the sunglasses storageis over the driver door.

Underseat Storage

If equipped, there is storage underthe front passenger seat. Lift theend of the tray and pull it forward toopen. Push it in toward the seat toclose.


Storage 4-3

Center Console Storage

For vehicles with center consolestorage, push the button and sliderearward to open.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover

If equipped, use the cargo cover tocover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To install, hang the loops on theliftgate anchors.

Do not place objects on the cargocover.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear.

Pull the handle to lift.


4-4 Storage

Fold the load floor. Place the hookfrom the load floor inside the hookon the side trim.

Convenience Net

The vehicle may have aconvenience net.

The net is used to store small loadsand should not be used for heavyloads.

Warning Triangle

If equipped, the warning triangle isstowed in the rear storagecompartment.


Storage 4-5

First Aid Kit

If equipped, the first aid kit isstowed in the side rear storagecompartment.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items. Forroof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than75 kg (165 lb) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.


4-6 Storage

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-18Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-21

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-26Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-27Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-28Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-30Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-31Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-31

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth or OnStar, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7-16, OnStarOverview on page 14-1.



$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source): Press thethumbwheel inward to change theaudio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease or − to decrease thevolume.

Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn it on or off.A light on the button displays whenthe feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.



INT (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

b (Windshield Washer): Pull thewindshield wiper lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached. When the windshield wiperlever is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-16 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-21.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherFor vehicles with the rear wiper/washer, the controls are on the endof the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR (Rear Washer): Pushthe windshield wiper lever forwardto spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the front



windshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-16.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Setting the Compass Zone

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long trip or moving to anew area, the compass zone will

need to be reset. If the compass isnot set to the correct zone, it maygive false readings. The compasszone should be set to the area inwhich the vehicle is currentlytraveling.

Use the DIC buttons to set thecompass zone:

1. While the vehicle is in P (Park),press the MENU button todisplay the DIC menu.

2. Press and hold SET/CLR whilethe Set Area display is active.

3. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and zone number on themap. Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

4. Usewx to change to thecorrect zone number.

5. Press SET/CLR to confirm thesetting.

Recalibrating the Compass

Whenever the DIC or the battery isdisconnected, the compass must berecalibrated. To do this, the vehiclemust be driven in circles. Onlycalibrate the compass in amagnetically clean and safelocation, such as an open parkinglot, where driving the vehicle incircles is not a danger. It issuggested to calibrate away fromtall buildings, utility wires, manholecovers, or other industrial structures,if possible.

If code 125 is displayed on the DIC,the compass needs to berecalibrated.



Use the DIC buttons to beginrecalibrating the compass:

1. While the vehicle is in P (Park),press the MENU button todisplay the DIC menu.

2. Press and hold SET/CLR whilethe Set Cal display is active.

3. Drive the vehicle in tight circles.The display will begin to flash.Continue driving in circles forabout 30 seconds. The compassdirection will be displayed.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7-4for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Press the CONFIG button andthen turn the TUNE/MENU knobto select Time and Date Settingsor press H.

2. Select the desired feature.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the next number.

5. To save and return to the Timeand Date Settings menu, press/ BACK at any time or press theTUNE/MENU knob afteradjusting the value.

6. Repeat steps 2–5 for theremaining feature.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Select Set Time Format.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

4. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect display format.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outleton the center stack below theclimate control. This outlet ispowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-19.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the



battery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-47.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 120 VoltAlternating Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet on the rear of the centerconsole. It can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-19. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.



The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster




SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-22.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN.

When the tank nears empty, the lowfuel warning light will come on.There is still a little fuel left, but thevehicle's fuel tank should be filledsoon. See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 5-21 for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates on which side of thevehicle the fuel door is located.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.



. The indicator moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward theshaded area, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

The vehicle may also have apassenger safety belt reminder light.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3-23.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-29 for



important safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several seconds,

the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or the on or off symbolto let you know the status of thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag are allowed toinflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a check toshow it is working.



It should go out when the engine isstarted. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery. If a shortdistance must be driven with thelight on, turn off all accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner, to help reduce the drainon the battery.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-15 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run as

smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and



could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-44. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. The

vehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.



{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-64.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF or if the light comeson, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the brakes will stillwork, but the antilock brakes will notwork. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, the antilockbrakes will not work and there is a

problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-16.

The ABS warning light will come onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

Power Steering WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.



If this light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, the system may not beworking. If this happens, see yourdealer for service.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

For vehicles with the LDW system,this light briefly comes on amberwhile starting the vehicle. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

This light also comes on greenwhen the system is switched on andready to operate.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-40.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If available, this light displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-34.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9-28 and StabiliTrak®


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.



This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9-28 and StabiliTrak®


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-30 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9-28.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: The engine coolanttemperature warning lightindicates that the vehicle hasoverheated. Driving with this lighton can damage the engine and itmay not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating on page 10-15.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-15.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10-42.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-44.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

If the vehicle has low engine oilpressure, this light will stay on afterthe engine is started, or come onwhile driving.

This indicates that the engine is notreceiving enough oil. The enginecould be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil pressure light could alsocome on in other situations:. When the ignition is on but the

engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show itis working. The light will go outwhen the ignition is turned on.If it does not come on with the



ignition on, there may be aproblem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

. If the vehicle comes to a hardstop, the light may come on for amoment. This is normal.

Low Fuel Warning Light

Metric Shown, English Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds periodicallywhen the vehicle is low on fuel. Thelight turns off when fuel is added tothe fuel tank.

Immobilizer Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the immobilizersystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-10.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are in use.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6-2.



Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps on page 6-4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-32.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-25. All messages appear inthe DIC display in the center of theinstrument cluster.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal lever.The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.



The bottom of the DIC displayshows the position of the shift leverand the odometer. It may also showthe direction the vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press toset or clear the menu item whenit is displayed.

2. w / x (Band): Turn the bandto scroll through the menu items.A small marker will move acrossthe bottom of the page as youscroll through the items. Thisshows where each page is inthe menu.

3. MENU: Press to get to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Usew / x to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Navigation

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 and Trip 2

These displays show the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR, or thetrip odometer reset stem in thecluster, while the trip odometerdisplay is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.



Fuel Economy

This display shows instantaneousand average fuel economy in litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg).

The instantaneous fuel economyreflects only the current fueleconomy and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. Unlikeaverage economy, this displaycannot be reset.

Average fuel economy iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.The average fuel economy can bereset by pressing SET/CLR whilethe Average Fuel Economy displayis showing.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average is

calculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation

This display is used for theNavigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the infotainmentmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Vehicle InformationMenu is displayed. Usew / x toscroll through the following menuitems:. Unit. Remaining Oil Life. Tire Pressure

Unit

Movew / x to switch betweenmetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.



Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-27. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-7. In additionto the Engine Oil Life Systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-3 for more information.

Remember, the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay must be reset after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset theRemaining Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.

It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theEngine Oil Life System, press SET/CLR while the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10-43 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-44 formore information.

Compass

The vehicle has a compass displayin the DIC. See Compass onpage 5-5 for more information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

If this message displays, start thevehicle to prevent further draining ofthe battery.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-19.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-18.

BRAKES OVERHEATED

This message may display if thebrakes are too hot.

HILL START ASSIST ACTIVE

This message is displayed when HillStart Assist (HSA) is preventing thevehicle from rolling while driving offon a grade. See Hill Start Assist(HSA) on page 9-28.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed if theparking brake is applied. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 9-27 formore information.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the brakeassist system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5-5.

– –Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-32.



Door Ajar Messages

DOOR(S) OPEN

A vehicle symbol will be displayedon the DIC showing which door isopen along with this message.Close the door completely.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display when theliftgate is open. Close the liftgatecompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When the engine oil is changed, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22, EngineOil on page 10-7, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-7.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.



If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6-3.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned off. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6-3.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement onpage 10-23 and Replacement Bulbson page 10-26 for more informationon turn signal bulb replacement.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If equipped with the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9-34.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due to



road spray. To clean the system,clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

If equipped with the Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) system, thismessage may display if the LDWsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) onpage 9-40.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9-36.

PARK ASSIST FAULT CLEANBUMPER

This message displays if snow,mud, ice, or dirt is blocking thesensors on the bumpers. Clean thebumpers.

SERVICE LANE DEPARTUREWARNING

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW)system is disabled and needservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic Frontand Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)system. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9-36.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when the rear drive systemis overheating. This message turnsoff when the rear drive system coolsdown. If the warning message stayson for a while, you need to reset thewarning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again. If themessage stays on, see your dealerright away. See All-Wheel Drive onpage 9-26 for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVESYSTEM

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if a problem occurs withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message



is still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the AWDsystem needs service. See yourdealer.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isfirst turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9-28 formore information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem and a chime may sound.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-44.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-44.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-20.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-35, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-42.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the SET/CLR button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22.



Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

TUNE/MENU: Press the center ofthe knob or outer ring for radios withnavigation to enter the menus andselect menu items. Turn the knob orouter ring to scroll through themenus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.The key must be in the ON/RUNposition.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob orouter ring to highlight the VehicleSettings menu.

3. Press the TUNE/MENU knob orouter ring to select the menu.

4. Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Languages. Time and Date. Radio Settings. Phone Settings. Display Settings. Vehicle Settings

Languages

The following list of languages maybe available:. English. French. Spanish



Select the desired language.

Time and Date

Select the Time and Date menu andthe following will be displayed:. Set Time. Set Date. 12 hr / 24 hr Format

Set Time

Select to manually set the time.Turn TUNE/MENU knob or outerring to change the number, thenpress the knob or outer ring toconfirm and go to the next number.

Set Date

Select to manually set the date.Turn TUNE/MENU knob or outerring to change the number, thenpress the knob or outer ring toconfirm and go to the next number.

12 hr / 24 hr Format

Select to set the 12/24 hour format.

Select 12 hr or 24 hr.

Radio Settings

Select Radio Settings and thefollowing may be displayed:. Auto Volume. Maximum Startup Volume. Radio Favorites

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

Select Off, Low, Medium, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

Select to manually set the startupvolume of the radio.

Turn TUNE/MENU knob or outerring to increase or decrease thevalue.

Radio Favorites

Select to manually set the numberof favorite pages.

Select 1−6.

Phone Settings

Select Phone Settings and thefollowing may be displayed:. Bluetooth. Return to Factory Settings

Bluetooth

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Activation. Device List. Pair Device. Change Bluetooth Code

Activation

When on, the system will allow aBluetooth device to connect.

Select On or Off.



Device List

Allows the management of aBluetooth device.

Select Connect, Separate,or Delete.

Pair Device

Allows the pairing of a newBluetooth device. See “Bluetooth” inthe infotainment manual.

Change Bluetooth Code

Manually change or set the code.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn Bluetooth to the defaultsettings.

Select Yes or No.

Display Settings

Select Display Settings and thefollowing may be displayed:. Home Page Menu. Display Off

Home Page Menu

Select Home Page Menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Customize. Sort. Restore Home Page Defaults

Customize

Select what icons will be availableon the Home Page.

Turn TUNE/MENU knob or outerring to select an icon, then press theknob or outer ring.

Sort

This allows the first Home Page tobe customized. See “Home Page”under “Using the System” in theinfotainment manual.

Restore Home Page Defaults

Select Restore Home Page Defaultsto return the Home Page to thedefault settings.

Select Yes or No.

Vehicle Settings

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings?

Climate and Air Quality

If equipped, select the Climate andAir Quality menu and the followingmay be displayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog



Auto Fan Speed

This allows the selection of theautomatic fan speed. This featuresets the climate control fan speed tomaintain the interior temperature.

Select High, Medium, or Low.

Air Conditioning Mode

When on, the Air Conditioning willcome on when the vehicle isstarted.

Select On, Off, or Last Setting.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

On vehicles with remote start andheated seats, the heated seats canbe set to on or off.

Select On or Off.

Auto Defog

When selected and high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply andturn on the air conditioner or theheater. The fan speed may slightlyincrease to help prevent fogging.

When high humidity is no longerdetected, the system will return toits prior operation.

Select or Deselect.

Auto Rear Defog

When selected, this feature turns onthe rear defogger at vehicle startwhen the interior temperature is coldand fog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1.

Select or Deselect.

Comfort and Convenience

If equipped, select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Auto Memory Recall. Chime Volume

. Button Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Reverse Gear Wiper

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Auto Memory Recall

If equipped, this feature recalls thedriver seat and outside mirrors topreviously stored Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter memorypositions when entering the vehicle.See Memory Seats on page 3-6.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Select Normal or High.



Button Volume

This allows the selection of thevolume level when a button ispressed.

Select Normal or High.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

This feature tilts the outside mirrorswhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse)allowing the driver to view the curbfor parallel parking.

Select On or Off.

Auto Reverse Gear Wiper

When selected, the rear wiper willintermittent wipe when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). Whendeselected, the rear wiper willcontinuously wipe when the vehicleis shifted into R (Reverse).

Select or Deselect.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exit Lighting

. Vehicle Locator Lights

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the headlamps, parkinglamps, taillamps, and most of theinterior lamps to turn on brieflywhen K is pressed.

Select or Deselect.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Open Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out

When selected, this feature willkeep the driver door from lockingwhen the door is open. Whendeselected, the Delayed Door Lockmenu will be available and the doorwill lock as programmed throughthis menu.

Select or Deselect.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select All Doors, Driver Door,or OFF.

Delayed Door Lock

When selected, this feature willdelay the locking of the doors afterthe last door is closed.

Select or Deselect.



Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed(depending on the system):. Remote Unlock Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Flash Lights or Off.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

When set to Driver Door, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen K is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the first pressof K.

Select Driver Door or All Doors.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select Return to Factory Settings, toreturn all vehicle personalization tothe default settings.

Select Yes or No.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic lamp controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps

. Taillamps

. License Plate Lamps

. Instrument Panel Lights

. Sidemarker Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps


6-2 Lighting

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5-22.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

3 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on.

To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps can makeit easier for others to see the front ofyour vehicle during the day. Fullyfunctional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first soldin Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow-beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.


Lighting 6-3

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamp control to the offposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL cannot be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6-1.

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel. Makesure it is not covered, or theheadlamps will be on when they arenot needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lamps

come on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you are


6-4 Lighting

having trouble. Press andmomentarily hold again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If a bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10-27.

Front Fog Lamps

If the vehicle is equipped with frontfog lamps, the button is on theoutboard side of the instrumentpanel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# (Front Fog Lamps): Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the foglamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high-beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panelcontrols and infotainment displayscreen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in thedoor position.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner above the rear seats.

9 (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

H (Door): When the button isreturned to the middle position, thelamps turn on automatically when adoor is opened.

R (On): Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are in the overheadconsole.

# or$ (Reading Lamps): Pressto turn each lamp on or off.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, back-up lamps, and mostof the interior lamps turn on brieflywhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lights will dimto off. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lamps anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

The exit lighting feature can bechanged. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-31.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9-4.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-19.


7-2 Infotainment System

The vehicle may have a base radiothat is included in this manual. Seethe separate infotainment manualfor information on the connectiveradio and the navigation system,audio players, phone, and voicerecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview

1. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a different audiosource.

2. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.



3. s © (Previous/Reverse)

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

4. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

5. ¨\ (Next/Forward)

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

6. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites Page). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

7. CD. Selects the CD player.

8. AUX (Auxiliary). Selects an external audio

source.

9. V /8 (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

10. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

11. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

12. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

13. TUNE/MENU. Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,or set numeric valueswhile in a menu.

. Press to select menuitems.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

. Bluetooth: Press toanswer a call, or turn toanswer or reject a call,then press to confirm.

14. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the settings menu.

15. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

16. Z (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

17. H (Clock)

. Opens the clock menu.



18. AS 1-2 (Autostore). Radio: Press to select the

auto store station page,or press and hold toautomatically storestations to the pages.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn toadjust the volume.

V /8 (Phone/Mute): Press andhold to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press and hold V /8again to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The TUNE/MENU knob and /BACK are used to navigate themenu system.

TUNE/MENU:

Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

/ BACK:

Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.



Activating a Setting

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the character.

Press / BACK to delete the lastcharacter in the sequence or pressand hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the TUNE/MENUknob until the value changesto 0.

Press / BACK to go back to theTone Settings menu.



Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press / BACK to go back to theSystem Configuration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.





Radio

AM-FM RadioControl Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

O /VOL (Power/Volume):. Press to turn the radio on or off.. Turn the knob to increase or

decrease the volume. Thevolume is adjusted for thecurrent audio source or voiceprompts.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween AM or FM.

TUNE/MENU: Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

s © or ¨\ : Press to seek theprevious or next station or track.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list and select thefavorites page.

Buttons 1−6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Press toselect the auto store station page,or press and hold to automaticallystore stations to the pages.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM or FM. The last stationthat was playing starts playingagain.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly presss © or ¨\ toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holds © or ¨\ untilthe station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.



Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe station lists are updated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe TUNE/MENU knob.

Radio Settings

To access the Radio Settings menu:


2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob untilRadio Settings displays. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob to displayother options within that feature.

Audio system settings or featurescan be customized for:. Auto Volume. Startup Volume. Number of Favorite Pages. RDS

Auto Volume: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select volume Off,Low, Medium, or High.

Startup Volume: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to increase or decreasethe infotainment startup volume.

Number of Favorite Pages: Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to highlightthe number of favorites. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to select.

RDS: Press the TUNE/MENU knobto turn RDS on or off.



Finding a Station

Select a band such as AM or FM.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, press the correspondingpreset button.

Seeking a Station

Presss © or ¨\ to search for astation.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. Each page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be from differentradio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV 1-2-3 (favorites) button. Thecurrent page number displays abovethe preset buttons. The storedstations for each list display at thebottom of the screen. The number ofpreset FAV lists can be changed.

To store a radio station to afavorites page:

1. Press the RADIO/BAND buttonuntil the desired band isselected.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tothe station.

3. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll the list.

4. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons for more thantwo seconds. The stationfrequency appears on the presetbutton at the bottom of thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps for each presetin each page.

To recall a preset station from afavorites page:

1. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll to the page.

2. Press the preset button. Thestored preset station is recalled.

Autostore Stations

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press RADIO/BAND to selectFM or AM.

2. Press AS 1-2 for at leasttwo seconds. An update windowwill display on the screen, pressCancel at any time to cancel theupdates.

3. The radio will automatically storethe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS 1-2 button to alternatebetween the autostore page oneand two. Select the preset of thedesired station.

AS 1 or 2 will display on the radiowhen listing to autostore presetstations.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.



Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features areavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, theradio can:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe current FM station, the stationname or call letters display on theaudio screen. RDS can provide aprogram type (PTY) for currentprogramming and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

Radio ReceptionUnplug electronic devices from theaccessory power outlets if there isinterference or static in the radio.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can cause

station frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

If equipped, SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service provides digital radioreception. Tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.



Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerFor vehicles equipped with anavigation or connected radio, see“CD Player” in the infotainmentmanual.

The CD player can be used for CDsand MP3s.

With the ignition on, insert a CD intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and begins playing.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) forvideo to display.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the quality

of the music or video that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the disc using amarking pen.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to select the CD player.

s © or ¨\: Press to selecttracks or to rewind or fast forwardwithin a track.



INFO (Information): Press todisplay additional information aboutthe current track that may beavailable.

TUNE/MENU: Turn this knob todisplay the track list. Press to selectthe track from the list. The systemplays the selected track and returnsto the CD screen.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressZ.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD button if there is adisc in the player; it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holds © or ¨\ torewind or fast forward within thecurrent track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles



. Genres

. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Error Messages

If Disc Read Error displays and/orthe disc comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is not from a correct

region.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

Auxiliary DevicesFor vehicles equipped with anavigation or connected radio, see“Auxiliary Devices” in theinfotainment manual.

The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary jack or USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7-4.

Some vehicle may have an AUXinput and USB port are in the centerconsole.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

Not all USB drives are compatiblewith the USB port.



For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system. Devices arealso charged while plugged into theUSB port.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks that are found can besearched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audio Books. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audio Books, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs to On or Off, thenpress the / BACK button to returnto the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the/ BACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.



Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs to On or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists—This only displays if a

playlist is found on the device.. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres



. Folder View



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs to On or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Phone

Bluetooth

General Information

Vehicles with a UniversalHands-free Phone (UHP) systemcan use a Bluetooth® capablemobile phone with a Hands-FreeProfile to make and receive phonecalls. The infotainment system andvoice control are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe UHP system can be up to 10 m(33 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the UHP system.

Other Information

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth® SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

UHP Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate the UHPsystem.


Steering wheel controls can beused to:. Answer incoming calls. Confirm system information. Start voice recognition (if

equipped). End a call. Reject a call. Cancel an operation. Make outgoing calls using the

call list

b (Phone) or b / g (Phone/Pushto Talk, If Equipped): Press toanswer incoming calls or confirmsystem information. If equipped,press to start voice control. Pressand hold for two to three seconds toaccess the call list.



$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

To make outgoing calls using thecall list.

1. Press b or b / g.2. Highlight the phone number by

toggling the SRC switch upor down.

3. Dial the highlighted number bypressing b or b / g.

Infotainment System Controls

5 : Press to enter the Phonemain menu.

Voice Control (If Equipped)

The voice control system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the UHP system, soundcomes through the vehicle's frontaudio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. UsetheO / VOL knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Turning Bluetooth On or Off


2. Select Phone Menu.

3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

4. Select Bluetooth.

5. Select Activation.

6. Select Yes or No.

Changing Bluetooth Code

The default Bluetooth code shouldwork with most mobile phones.If you are having difficulty pairingyour mobile phone, you can changethe code at any time.





5. Select Change Bluetooth Code.

6. Enter a new four-digit code, thenselect OK.

Ring Volume

There are three different volumesavailable for the UHP system.

To change the ring volume:




4. Select Sound & Signal.

5. Select Ring Volume.



6. Select Ring Volume 1, 2, or 3.

Ring Tone

There are different ring tonesavailable for the UHP system.

To change the ring tone:




4. Select Sound & Signal.

5. Select Ring Tones.

6. Select the tone.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled mobile phonemust be paired to the UHP systemfirst and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe mobile phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the mobile phone.. Up to five mobile phones can be

paired to the UHP system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.

. The UHP system connects withthe first available paired mobilephone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired mobile phonecan be connected to the UHPsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the mobile phoneis deleted.

Using UHP with InfotainmentControls

Pairing a Phone

If your mobile phone has simplepairing or auto discovery features,they need to be turned off beforethe mobile phone can be paired tothe UHP system. See the mobilephone manufacturer's user guide forinformation on these features.





5. Select Pair Device, then pressthe MENU button. A four-digitnumber appears on the displayand the UHP system goes intodiscovery mode.

6. Start the pairing process on themobile phone that will be pairedto the vehicle. Reference themobile phone manufacturer'suser guide for information on thisprocess.

Locate the device named UHPfollowed by a four-digit numberin the list on the mobile phoneand follow the instructions on themobile phone. Enter thefour-digit code provided by thesystem if necessary, then followthe instructions on theinfotainment display screen.

7. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional mobile phones.



Viewing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

To view all available mobile phonesthat are paired to the UHP system:





5. Select Device List.

6. Repeat Steps 1–4 to pairadditional mobile phones.

Deleting a Paired Phone

To remove a paired mobile phonefrom the UHP system:






6. Select the mobile phone todelete and follow the on screenprompts.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different pairedmobile phone, the new mobilephone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theUHP system before the process isstarted.

To connect to a different phone:






6. Select the new mobile phone tolink to and follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, the highlightedmobile phone will be deleted.

Making a Call Using Phone Bookand Call List

For mobile phones that support thephone book and call list features,the UHP system can use thecontacts and call list stored on your

mobile phone to make calls. Seeyour mobile phone manufacturer'suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your mobile phone.

The time it takes to download thephone book and call list from yourmobile phone to the UHP systemcan vary depending on the size ofthe phone book and call list storedon your mobile phone.

When a mobile phone supports thephone book and call list features,the Phone Book, and Call Listmenus are automatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe mobile phone to make a call.

The Call List menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your mobilephone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:





3. Select Phone Book.

4. Select Search.

5. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with.To continue scrolling through theentire list, turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

6. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallList menu:

1. Press and hold5.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCall list.

3. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call Using a TelephoneNumber

To make a call:

1. Press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect Enter Number.

3. Select the numbers to be dialed.

4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

To accept the incoming call, turn theTUNE/MENU knob to “Answer” andpress TUNE/MENU, or press b / gon the steering wheel controls.

To decline the incoming call, turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to “Decline”and press TUNE/MENU, orpress b / g on the steering wheelcontrols.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe mobile phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

To accept the incoming call, turn theTUNE/MENU knob to “Answer” andpress TUNE/MENU, or press b orb / g on the steering wheelcontrols.

To decline the incoming call, turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to “Decline”and press TUNE/MENU, orpress $ /i on the steering wheelcontrols.

1. Press 5.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on themobile phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.



To start a conference call while ina call:

1. Press TUNE/MENU and selectEnter Number.

2. Enter the character sequencethen select call.

3. After the call has been placed,press TUNE/MENU and chooseMerge Calls.

4. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps1–3. The number of callers thatcan be added is limited by yourwireless service carrier.

To disconnect from one caller whilein a conference call, select DetachNumber from the menu and selectthe number to hang up on.

Ending a Call

Press TUNE/MENU and selectHang Up, or press $ /i on thesteering wheel controls.

To Mute a Call

Press TUNE/MENU and selectMute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Press TUNE/MENU and selectMute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)Tones

The UHP system can send numbersduring a call. This is used whencalling a menu driven phonesystem.

To access this system:

1. Press TUNE/MENU and selectEnter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.

Operating UHP Using VoiceControl (If Equipped)

The voice control of the UHPsystem enables you to operateseveral functions of the mobilephone using your voice. The UHPsystem uses voice commands tocontrol the system and dial phone

numbers. After input of thecommand, the infotainment systemguides you through the dialoguewith appropriate questions andfeedback to achieve the desiredaction. The commands andnumbers can be spoken without apause between the individual words.

In addition you can save telephonenumbers under a name tag that isselectable by you. The telephoneconnection can be set up withthis name.

In the event of incorrect operation orincorrect codes, the voice controlgives you voice feedback andrequests you to re-enter the desiredcommand. Apart from this, the voicecontrol acknowledges importantcommands and will ask ifnecessary.

In order that calls made inside thevehicle do not lead to unintentionaltriggering of the mobile phone, thevoice control does not start until ithas been activated.



Activating the Voice Control

For vehicles without a navigationsystem, press b or b / g on thesteering wheel to activate the voicecontrol of the UHP system.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, press b or b / g on thesteering wheel to activate the voicecontrol of the UHP system. Thesystem responds with a tone. Afterthe tone, say ”Phone.“

For the duration of the dialogue, anyaudio source that is active is muted,and any traffic news fade-in iscanceled.

Adjusting the Volume for VoiceOutput

Turn the volume knob of theinfotainment system or pressthe + / - buttons on the steeringwheel.

Canceling Dialogue

Any of the following will deactivatethe voice control and cancel thedialogue:

. Press $ /i on the steeringwheel controls.

. Enter the command “Cancel.”

. Do not enter a command forsome time.

. The command is unrecognizedafter three tries.

Main Menu Commands

The UHP system has a set of mainmenu commands that are availablewhen voice control is first started.After the voice control is activated, ashort tone indicates that the voicecontrol system is waiting for acommand.

Available commands:. “Dial”. “Call”. “Re-dial”

. “Save”

. “Delete”

. “Directory”

. “Pair”

. “Select device”

. “Voice feedback”

. “Help”

. “Cancel”

Frequently Used Commands

Here is a list of frequently usedcommands:. “Help”: the dialogue is

terminated and all commandsavailable in the current contextare enumerated.

. “Cancel”: the voice control isdeactivated.

. “Yes”: a suitable action istriggered depending on thecontext.

. “No”: a suitable action istriggered depending on thecontext.



Voice Feedback

Each voice input is answered orcommented on by the infotainmentsystem by way of a voice outputthat is adapted to the situation.

To switch the voice output on or off,enter “Voice feedback” or press bor b / g.

Pairing, Saving, or Deleting Phonefrom Device List

With the command “Pair” a mobilephone can be saved to or deletedfrom the device list of the UHPsystem. A device number will beassigned by the UHP system to themobile phone when it is paired.

Available commands:. “Add”. “Delete”. “Help”. “Cancel”

Example of a Dialogue

User: “Pair.”

Voice output: “Do you want to addor delete a device?”

User: “Add.”

Voice output: “Using the pairfunction in the external device, enter<1234> to pair.”

(At this time, start the pairingprocess on the mobile phone thatwill be paired to the vehicle. See themobile phone manufacturer's userguide for information on thisprocess. Locate the device namedUHP followed by a four-digit numberin the list on the mobile phone.Follow the instructions on themobile phone and enter thefour-digit code provided by thesystem.)

Voice output: “Do you want to pairthe device?”

User: “Yes.”

Voice output: “Paired, endingsession.”

Selecting Phone from Device List

The “Select device” command canbe used to select a different pairedmobile phone. The UHP systemasks for a device number that wasassigned by the UHP system to themobile phone when it was paired.


User: “Select device.”

Voice output: “Please say a devicenumber to select.”

User: “device number.”

Voice output: “Do you want to selectthe device number “device number.”

(The device name appears on theinfotainment display screen.)

User: “Yes.”

Voice output: “One moment please,the system searches for theselected device.”

Voice output: “Device number“device number” is selected, endingsession.”



Telephone Number Dialing

After the “Dial” command, the voicecontrol requests input of a number.

The telephone number must bespoken in your normal speechwithout any artificial pausesbetween the numbers.

Recognition is best, if a pause of atleast half a second is made afterevery three to five digits. Theinfotainment system then repeatsthe numbers recognized.

Available Commands:. “Dial”: the inputs are accepted.. “Digit”: a numeric value between

“0–9” is entered.. “Delete”: the number last

entered or the block of numberslast entered is deleted.

. “Plus”: a preceding “+” is enteredfor a call abroad.

. “Verify”: the inputs are repeatedby the voice output.

. “Asterisk”: an asterisk “*” isentered.

. “Hash”: a hash character “#” isentered.

. “Pause”: a pause is entered intothe character sequence.

. “Help”

. “Cancel”

The telephone number entered canhave a maximum length of 25 digits.

To be able to make a call abroadyou can say the word “Plus” (+) atthe beginning of your number. Theplus allows you to call from anycountry without knowing the prefixfor calls made abroad in thatcountry. Then say the requiredcountry code.


User: “Dial.”

Voice output: “Please say thenumber to dial.”

User: “Plus four nine.”

User: “Seven three one.”

Voice output: “Seven three one.”

User: “One one nine nine.”

Voice output: “One one nine nine.”

User: “Dial.”

Voice output: “The number is beingdialed.”

Making a Call Using Name Tag

When the “Call” command is used,a telephone number is entered thathas been stored in the telephonebook as a name tag.

Available commands:. “Yes”. “No”. “Help”. “Cancel”


User: “Call.”

Voice output: “Please say the nametag to call.”



(For name tag information, see“Saving a Name Tag” later in thissection.)

User: ”Name tag.“

Voice output: “Seven three one.”

User: “Yes.”

Voice output: “Calling.”

Starting a Second Call

Press b or b / g to start a secondcall during an active telephone call.

Available commands:. “Send”: activate manual DTMF

(touch-tone dialing), e.g., forvoice mail or telephone banking.

. “Send name tag”: activate DTMF(touch-tone dialing) by entering aname tag.

. “Dial”

. “Call”

. “Re-dialing”

. “Help”

. “Cancel”


User: Press b or b / g if atelephone call is active.

User: “Send.”

Voice output: “Please say thenumber to send.”

(For number input information, seethe dialogue example for “Making aCall Using a Telephone Number”earlier in this section.)

User: “Send.”

Re-dialing

The “Re-dialing” command re-dialsthe last number dialed.

Saving a Name Tag

The “Save” command is used tostore a telephone number in thetelephone book as a name tag.

The name entered must berepeated once. The pitch andpronunciation must be as identicalas possible for both name inputs,otherwise the voice control willreject the inputs.

A maximum of 50 name tags can bestored in the telephone book.

Name tags are speaker-dependent,i.e., only the person who recorded aname tag can open it. To avoid thestart of the recording of a savedname from being cut off, a shortpause should be left after an inputrequest.

To be able to use the name tagindependently of the location, i.e.,including other countries, alltelephone numbers should beentered with a “plus” character anda country code.

Available commands:. “Save”: the inputs are accepted.. “Re-dialing”: the last input is

repeated.. “Help”. “Cancel”


User: “Save.”



Voice output: “Please say thenumber to save.”

User: Say number to save.

(For number input information, seethe dialogue example for “Making aCall Using a Telephone Number”earlier in this section.)

User: “Save.”

User: “Name Tag” (give name tag).

Voice output: “Please repeat thename tag to confirm.”

User: “Name Tag.”

Voice output: “Saving thename tag.”

Deleting a Name Tag

The “Delete” command is used todelete a previously saved name tag.

Available commands:. “Yes”. “No”. “Help”. “Cancel”

Listening to Stored Name Tags

The “Directory” command is used tolisten to all stored name tags.

Available commands:. “Call”: the telephone number of

the voice tag last read aloud isselected.

. “Delete”: the entry of the voicetag last read aloud is deleted.

Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.



Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod and iPhone” meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For moreinformation, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and musicand video-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. One or morepatents owned by Gracenote applyto this product and service. See theGracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicable

Gracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables this



application to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”) fromonline servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agree thatyou will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violate theserestrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. For

more information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.



Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, andnon-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote Software or anyGracenote Server. In no case willGracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with this system.

1. Temperature Control


3. Fan Control

4. Recirculation

5. Air Conditioning


7. Defrost

9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Turn the knob completely to 0 toturn off the fan and air conditioningcompressor.


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature setting.

Air Delivery Mode Control:Press[,Y , or X to change thedirection of the airflow. Air deliverymode settings can be combined. Anindicator light comes on in theselected mode button.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off. Anindicator light comes on. If the fan isturned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning compressor willnot work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering. To improve fuel efficiencyand to cool the vehicle faster,recirculation may be automaticallyselected in warm weather when thetemperature is set to the coldestsetting. The recirculation light willnot come on. Pressh to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again it runs forabout five minutes beforeturning off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.


1. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

2. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls


4. Heated Steering Wheel (IfEquipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Air Conditioning

7. Fan Controls


9. Defrost

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode orfan setting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster,recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light



will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan Control): Press thelower9 button to decrease the fanspeed. Pressing the lower buttonlonger turns the fan and cooling off.Press the upper9 button toincrease the fan speed. Theselected fan speed is indicated by anumber on the display screen.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: Press[,Y,

or X to change the direction of theairflow. Air delivery mode settingscan be combined. An indicator lightcomes on in the selected modebutton.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioningcompressor will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see "Climate and Air Quality"under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-31.



Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation; see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-31. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 4°C(40°F) and below. The auto reardefogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button is

on and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2-12.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

M or L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated seats on or off. See HeatedFront Seats on page 3-8.

( (Heated Steering Wheel, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off. SeeHeated Steering Wheel onpage 5-3.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.

The system uses the driver’sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. The rear defogmay come on during remote startbased on cold ambient conditions.The rear defog indicator light doesnot come on during a remote start.If the vehicle has front heated seats,they may come on during a remotestart. The heated seat indicatorlights do not come on during aremote start. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-5 and Heated FrontSeats on page 3-8.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

Use the thumbwheels near the airvents to control the amount ofairflow or to shut off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

Maintenance

Air IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-12.

1. Open the glove box completelyand disconnect the dampener onthe outboard side.

2. Push in both sides of the glovebox and pull to remove.

3. Open the filter cover byreleasing tabs on both sides andpulling up the cover.



4. Replace the air filter.

5. Close the air filter cover andreinstall the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-23Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Object Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-36Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-43California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Driving Information

Driver BehaviorDriving is an importantresponsibility. Driver behavior, thedriving environment, and thevehicle's design all affect how well avehicle performs.

Being aware of these factors canhelp in understanding how thevehicle handles and what can bedone to avoid many types ofcrashes, including a rollover crash.

Most serious injuries and fatalities tounbelted occupants can be reducedor prevented by the use of safetybelts. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a personwearing a safety belt. In addition,avoiding excessive speed, suddenor abrupt turns, and drunken oraggressive driving can help maketrips safer and avoid the possibilityof a crash.

Driving EnvironmentBe prepared for driving in inclementweather, at night, or during othertimes where visibility or traction maybe limited, such as on curves,slippery roads, or hilly terrain.Unfamiliar surroundings can alsohave hidden hazards.

Learn more about driving in differentconditions and off-road driving inthis section.

Vehicle DesignUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. This is because theyhave a higher ground clearance anda narrower track or shorterwheelbase than passenger cars,which makes them more capable foroff-road driving. While these designcharacteristics provide the driverwith a better view of the road, thesevehicles do have a higher center ofgravity than other types of vehicles.



A utility vehicle does not handle thesame as a vehicle with a lowercenter of gravity, like a car, in similarsituations.

Safe driver behavior andunderstanding of the environmentcan help avoid a rollover crash inany type of vehicle, including utilityvehicles.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.



Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-14.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be some



power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-35.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.



{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You could

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

crash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.

Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-26.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads in



shaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13-7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13-11. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-22.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.



If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9-28.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-64.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10-35 andTire Pressure on page 10-42.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.



2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

This vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labeltells the gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).



The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This could

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

far forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the regularbrake pedal applied.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

This position locks the steeringwheel, ignition, and transmission.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-27.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

3 (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be required

for emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

4 (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2-1.



Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission may be equipped withan electronic key lock releasesystem. This system is to preventignition key removal unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9-volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting on page 10-61.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, there is amanual key lock release. Locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert atool or key into the opening. Locatethe lever, and press it toward thedriver while removing the key fromthe ignition.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-47.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking



motor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to

allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key or button, andthe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterVehicles with the 1.4L engine mayhave an engine heater. The engineheater can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the heater at least four hoursbefore starting the vehicle. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-endof the cord will prevent engineheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use The Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

3. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated in the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery. It is shipped from thefactory with a tie holding it inplace. Use care in removing thetie so that the cord is notdamaged.

4. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.



{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

5. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down and

set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-27.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-19.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold thebrake pedal down. Then see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing thebutton on the shift lever. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift your transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, see“Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission)” in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with a shiftlock control. The shift lock control isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-61.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.



3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If the shift lever still cannot bemoved from P (Park), see “ShiftLock Manual Release.”

Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has anelectric park lock. The key must bein the ON/RUN position, and thebrake pedal pressed so the shiftlever can be moved from theP (Park) position. If the battery haslost power, the shift lever cannot bemoved from P (Park) unless the shiftlock manual release is disengagedmanually.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Turn the ignition OFF andremove the key.

2. Hold the brake pedal down.Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the cover on theconsole.

4. Insert and press the ignition keyinto the slot.

5. Move the shift lever out ofP (Park). If P (Park) is selectedagain after the key is removedfrom the slot, the shift lever willbe locked again.

6. Remove the key from the slot.

7. Close the cover.

8. Have the cause of the problemfixed by your dealer.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-19and Engine Exhaust on page 9-22.

AutomaticTransmission

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-19.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition key



is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9-20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-10.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, use

N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

The vehicle has an automaticneutral shift feature which allows thetransmission to automatically shift toN (Neutral) when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gearengaged. The reduced load on theengine improves vehicle fueleconomy.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

M (Manual Mode): This positionallows shifting similar to a manualtransmission. See Manual Mode onpage 9-25.



Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual Mode).

While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remain inthe driver selected gear. Whencoming to a stop in the manualposition, the vehicle willautomatically shift into1 (First) gear.

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the top of the shiftlever to upshift, or push the −(minus) end of the button todownshift.

The instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M,” forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using the DSC feature, thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. This canbe used for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm):. The transmission will not allow

shifting to the next higher gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too high.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf equipped, this feature transfersengine power, as required, to allfour wheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle,the system automatically detects thecompact spare and disables AWD toprotect the system. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagewill display on the instrumentcluster. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-25. To restore AWDoperation and prevent excessivewear on the system, replace thecompact spare with a full-size tire assoon as possible. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10-61.

AWD will be disabled and themessage will display if there isexcessive wheel spin. When thesystem cools down, AWD will berestored.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-17.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5-16.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.



Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.

After the driver completely stopsand holds the vehicle in a completestandstill on a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure to ensure that there is norolling. The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two-secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill, or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s), and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.



The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS is on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS can beturned off if needed.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is on the center stack.

TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing g. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Theappropriate message will display in



the Driver Information Center (DIC).Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and release gagain to turn the system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9-10 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9-8 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press thecruise control button to reengagewhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control on page 9-32.

Adding non-GM accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path, and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on in theinstrument cluster. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, d comes on and stayson. The vehicle is safe to drive, butthe system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.



If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is on the center stack.

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing and holding guntil g and i come on in theinstrument cluster. The appropriatemessage will display in the DIC.When StabiliTrak is turned off, thesystem will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicle orlimit wheel spin. TCS will also beturned off. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. Press andrelease g again to turn bothsystems back on.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on when the vehicle speedexceeds 50 km/h (31 mph).

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9-32.



Cruise ControlThe cruise control lets the vehiclemaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systemthat begins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9-28 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9-30. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press the upper or

lower portion of the button to turnthe cruise control system on or off.An white indicator light will turn onor off in the instrument cluster.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up to resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.



SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speedand activate cruise control or tomake the vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press 1 to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed, a greencruise control indicator appears onthe instrument cluster.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. Once thevehicle speed is about 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, move the thumbwheeltoward SET/− briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,



you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal;

when cruise control disengages,the indicator light will not be lit.

. Press*.

. Press 1 to turn the cruisecontrol system off completely.The cruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressing 1or if the vehicle is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemThe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)system may help to avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a visual alertand beeps when approaching avehicle directly ahead too quickly.

The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ WARNING

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-4.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. The vehicle ahead indicatorwill display green when a vehicle isdetected in front. Vehicles may notbe detected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills; or due to poorvisibility. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ WARNING

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the FCAdisplay will come on and severalbeeps will sound from the front.

When this occurs, the brake systemprepares for driver braking to occurmore rapidly, if needed.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press to set thealert timing. The first button pressshows the current control setting onthe DIC. Additional button presseswill change this setting and turn thesystem off.



Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts to turning vehicles, vehicles inother lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5-28.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic Front andRear Parking Assist (UFRPA)system, assists the driver with

parking and avoiding objects.UFRPA operates at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph). The sensorson the front and rear bumper detectobjects up to 1.2 m (4 ft) in front ofthe vehicle, 2.5 m (8 ft) behind thevehicle, and at least 25 cm (10 in)off the ground and below liftgatelevel. This detection distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

{ WARNING

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

How the System Works

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse) the front and rearsensors are automatically turned on.After the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), the rear sensors areturned off and the front sensors stayon until the vehicle is above aspeed of 8 km/h (5 mph). For thefront park assist system to be activeagain without shifting intoR (Reverse), the park assist buttonon the center stack must bepressed. See “Turning the SystemOn and Off” later in this section.

UFRPA operates only at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph).

When the vehicle is in N (Neutral),the system may be active. If thevehicle is in a car wash, the sensorsmay detect objects in the car wash.See “Turning the System On andOff” later in this section to turn thesystem off.



High-toned beeps from the frontspeakers are for objects detectednear the front bumper. Low-tonedbeeps from the rear speakers arefor objects detected near the rearbumper. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

Objects Detected by Both theFront and Rear Sensors

In general, if objects are detected atthe same time near both the frontand rear bumpers while backing up,the beeps only sound to indicatethat objects are close to the rearbumper.

However, if an object comes within0.3 m (1 ft) of the front bumper whilethe vehicle is backing up and at thesame time there is another objectfurther than 0.3 m (1 ft) from the rearbumper, then the beeps only soundto indicate the front object.

Turning the System On and Off

The UFRPA system can be turnedon and off by pressing the parkassist button on the center stack.

The indicator on the park assistbutton lights up when the system ison and turns off when it has beendisabled.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF briefly displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

UFRPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the UFRPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle'sbumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-67.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur after



washing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, UFRPA willreturn to normal operation.

. An object or cover is attached tothe front of the vehicle.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have an RVCsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result in

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

An image appears on the radioscreen with the message CheckSurroundings for Safety when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The radio screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To see the previous screen sooner,do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

infotainment system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have the



camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)The vehicle may have an LDWsystem. Read this entire sectionbefore using the system.

LDW may help avoid crashes due tounintentional lane departures. It mayprovide a warning if the vehicle iscrossing a lane without using a turnsignal. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. It onlyoperates at speeds of 56 km/h(35 mph) or greater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and either threebeeps will be sounded from the leftor right, depending on the lane

departure direction. LDW will notwarn if the turn signal is on or if asharp maneuver is made.

{ WARNING

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you when

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

departing the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack, forward of the shiftlever. The control indicator will lightwhen LDW is on.



When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator will come on briefly.

LDW operates at speeds of 56 km(35 mph) or greater. If LDW is on,the LDW indicator will appear greenif the system detects a left or rightlane marking. This indicator willchange to amber, flash, and soundthree beeps if the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the system is on and the vehicle istraveling 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater, and LDW symbol does notappear:. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.

. The camera sensor may beblocked by dirt, snow, or ice.

. The windshield may bedamaged.

. The weather may be limitingvisibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

{ WARNING

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlampsor windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

windshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occasionallyoccur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

LDW Messages

SERVICE LANE DEPARTUREWARNING: This message mayappear on the DIC to indicate thatLDW is not working properly. If thismessage remains on after continueddriving, the system needs service.Take your vehicle to your dealer.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE: This messagemay appear in the DIC if LDW doesnot activate due to a temporarycondition.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noisemay be heard. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when using ahigher octane rated gasoline, theengine needs service.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inflex fuel vehicles.

{ CAUTION

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive called



methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See

the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-14. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel not

recommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list of



marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of Fuel System TreatmentPLUS, part number 88861013,added to the fuel tank at everyengine oil change, can help cleandeposits from fuel injectors andintake valves. GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is behind ahinged fuel door on the right rearside of the vehicle. If equipped, thefuel door is locked when the vehicledoors are locked. Press K on theRKE to unlock.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-67.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-14.



{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-14.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-33 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-34.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-10Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-15Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-20Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-26Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52


10-2 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-61

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-64Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-34.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-16.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-33.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-13.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.


10-4 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andmove the secondary hoodrelease lever toward the rightside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,above the radiator. Securelyplace the hood prop into the sloton the underside of the hood.


Vehicle Care 10-5

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop from theslot in the underside of the hoodand return the prop to itsretainer. The prop rod must clickinto place when returning it tothe retainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 10-7

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10-7.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-7.

5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-11.

6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10-17.

7. Auxiliary Fuse Block. SeeEngine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-28.

8. Battery on page 10-19.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-16.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-28.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


10-8 Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN mark onthe dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that you

have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the MAX mark, theengine could be damaged. Youshould drain out the excess oil orlimit driving of the vehicle andseek a service professional toremove the excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange between the MIN and MAXmarks. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message comes on.See Vehicle Messages onpage 5-25. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 mi). It is possible that, if drivingunder the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must


10-10 Vehicle Care

be changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Press the MENU button to showRemaining Oil Life on thedisplay. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining

useful life. If 99% is displayed,that means that 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

2. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, press the SET/CLRbutton while the oil life display isactive. After a few seconds,there will be a single chime andthe oil life will be reset to 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONDIC message comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only

reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-6 for more information onlocation.


Vehicle Care 10-11

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervals.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. If you are driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If thefilter remains covered with dirt, anew filter is required.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

1. Remove the two screws, tilt thecover, and slide it out of theassembly.

2. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Lower the cover, slide it into theassembly, then secure with thetwo screws.

See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 for replacement intervals.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


10-12 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX‐COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000miles(50 000 km) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-15.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-13

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of cleandrinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of enginecoolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

It is normal to see coolant moving inthe upper coolant hose return linewhen the engine is running.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixture ofclean drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.


10-14 Vehicle Care

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and other

parts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.


Vehicle Care 10-15

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps1–3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof the engine overheating. SeeEngine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5-19.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13-7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13-11.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


10-16 Vehicle Care

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.


Vehicle Care 10-17

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.


10-18 Vehicle Care

If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake FluidThe brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 4 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-6 for the location of thereservoir. The fluid level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.

There are only two reasons why thefluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:. The fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-16.


Vehicle Care 10-19

What to Add

Use only new DOT 4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brakehydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT 4 fluid at aregular maintenance interval everytwo years. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-61 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requirechanging or checking unless thereis a fluid leak or unusual noise.If required, have the transfer caseserviced by your dealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-27.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-27.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-21

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-12.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the release button on thetop side of the wiper and pull thewiper blade out of the end of thewiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the button on thewiper blade clicks into place withthe wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back on thewindshield.

Notice: Damage may occur if thewiper blades are not in contactwith the windshield beforeturning on the wiper system.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Grasp the cover at the base andpull upward to unsnap.

2. Slide the cover toward the wiperblade tip to unhook it from theblade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that the cover hookslides into the slot in the bladeassembly.

5. Snap the cover down to secure.


Vehicle Care 10-23

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-26.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

1. Turn Signal Lamp

2. Low-Beam Headlamp

3. Parking Lamp

4. High-Beam Headlamp

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.

2. Remove the headlamp bulbaccess cover.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

4. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb.

5. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

6. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

7. Install the headlamp bulb accesscover.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Parking Lamp


2. Remove the parking lamp bulbsocket from the headlampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

Turn Signal Lamp


2. Remove the turn signal lampbulb socket from the headlampassembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.


10-26 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it.

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thelamp assembly openingengaging the clip side first.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking Lamp 7444NA

Front TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High-BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Low-BeamHeadlamp

H11 LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10-28, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10-31, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10-33.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clip and lift it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Sunroof

2 Outside RearviewMirror Switch

3 Canister VentSolenoid

4 Not Used

5 Electronic BrakeControl ModuleValve

6 Not Used

7 Not Used

8 TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

9 BCM RegulatedVoltage Control

10 Fuel System ControlModule R/C/Headlamp Leveling

11 Rear Wiper


Vehicle Care 10-29

Mini Fuses Usage

12 Rear WindowDefogger

13 Not Used

14 Outside RearviewMirror Heater

15 Fuel System ControlModule Battery

16 Heated SeatModule/MemoryModule

17 TransmissionControl Module R/C

18 Engine ControlModule R/C

19 Fuel Pump

20 Not Used

21 Fan Relay (AuxiliaryFuse Block)

22 Not Used

23 Ignition Coil/Injectors

24 Washer Pump

Mini Fuses Usage

25 Not Used

26 Canister PurgeSolenoid/WaterValve Solenoid/Oxygen Sensors –Pre and Post/TurboWastegate Solenoid(1.4L)/Turbo BypassSolenoid (1.4L)

27 Not Used

28 Not Used

29 Engine ControlModule PowertrainIgnition 1/Ignition 2

30 Mass Air FlowSensor

31 Left High-BeamHeadlamp

32 Right High-BeamHeadlamp

33 Engine ControlModule Battery

Mini Fuses Usage

34 Horn

35 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

36 Front Fog Lamps

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Electronic BrakeControlModule Pump

2 Front Wiper

3 Blower Motor

4 IEC R/C

5 Not Used

6 Not Used

7 Not Used

8 Cooling FanLow/Mid

9 Cooling Fan High

10 EVP


10-30 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

11 Starter Solenoid

U-MicroRelays

Usage

2 Not Used

4 Spare

HC-MicroRelays

Usage

7 Starter

MiniRelays

Usage

1 Run Crank

3 Cooling Fan Mid

5 Powertrain Relay

8 Cooling Fan Low

HC-MiniRelays

Usage

6 Cooling Fan High

Auxiliary Fuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips and lift it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


Relays Usage

01 ElectricVacuum Pump

02 Cooling FanControl 1

03 Cooling FanControl 2

04 Trailer (N/A)


Vehicle Care 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block ison the underside of the driver sideinstrument panel. To access thefuses, remove the storagecompartment. To remove thestorage compartment, open thecompartment and pull it out.


Mini Fuses Usage

1 Body ControlModule 1








9 Discrete LogicIgnition Sensor

10 Sensing DiagnosticModule Battery

11 Data LinkConnection


10-32 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

12 Heater, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningMDL/ICS

13 Liftgate Relay

14 UPA Module

15 LDW Module/InsideRearview Mirror

16 Adaptive ForwardLighting Module

17 PowerWNDWSW DR

18 Rain Sensor

19 Body ControlModule RegulatedVoltage Control

20 Steering WheelSwitch Backlighting

21 A/C AccessoryPower Outlet/PRNDL

Mini Fuses Usage

22 Cigar Lighter/DCAccessory PowerOutlet

23 Spare

24 Spare

25 Spare

26 Sensing DiagnosticModule RC/Automatic OccupantSensing Display

27 IPC/PTC Control/Clutch Switch

28 Headlamp Switch/AFL/DC Converter

29 Spare

30 Spare

31 IPC Battery

32 Radio/Chime/Aux Jack

33 Display/Faceplate

34 OnStar/UHP/DAB

S/B Fuses Usage

1 Spare

2 Spare

3 Power WindowMotor Front

4 Power WindowMotor Rear

5 Logistic Mode Relay

6 Spare

7 Spare

8 Spare

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Spare

Midi Fuse Usage

M01 PTC


Vehicle Care 10-33

Relays Usage

01 Accessory/RetainedAccessory Power

02 Liftgate

03 Spare

04 Spare

05 Logistic Mode

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind a cover on the left side ofthe rear compartment. To accessthe fuses, remove the cover.



10-34 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Driver Seat PowerLumbar Switch

2 Passenger SeatPower LumbarSwitch

3 Amplifier

4 Trailer Socket (N/A)

5 All-Wheel DriveModule

6 Automatic OccupantSensing Module

7 Spare

8 Trailer ParkingLamps (N/A)

9 Spare

10 Spare

11 Trailer Module (N/A)

12 Nav Dock

13 Heated SteeringWheel

Mini Fuses Usage

14 Trailer Socket (N/A)

15 EVP Switch

16 Water In FuelSensor

17 Inside RearviewMirror/RegulatedVoltage Control

18 Spare

S/B Fuses Usage

1 Driver Power SeatSwitch/MemoryModule

2 Passenger PowerSeat Switch

3 Trailer Module (N/A)

4 A/C-D/C Inverter

5 Battery

6 Headlamp Washer

7 Spare

S/B Fuses Usage

8 Spare

9 Spare

Relays Usage

1 Ignition Relay

2 Run Relay


Vehicle Care 10-35

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.


10-36 Vehicle Care

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-36.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-50.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10-36.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three


10-38 Vehicle Care

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-52.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-61 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-55.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-42.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


Vehicle Care 10-39

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, power


10-40 Vehicle Care

steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-42.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-42 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-49.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-52.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by

68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-43

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10-61.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or


10-44 Vehicle Care

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-44.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tire


Vehicle Care 10-45

and wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thelow tire pressure warning light andthe DIC warning message,if equipped, come on at each

ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, it may bepossible to view the tire pressurelevels. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-42.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition, but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-48, Tire Rotation onpage 10-48, and Tires onpage 10-35.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


10-46 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light,defined above, flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message may alsodisplay. The malfunction light andDIC warning message, if equipped,come on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause theseto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message,if equipped, should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should gooff when the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-50.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message, if equipped,come on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/


Vehicle Care 10-47

wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu(Menu 2) in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel (or up anddown arrows) to scroll to the TirePressure Menu Item screen.

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

A message requestingacceptance of the process maydisplay.

6. If requested, press the SET/CLRbutton again to confirm theselection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARN or TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARN orTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage on the DIC displayscreen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after the

rotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-49and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-54.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-49

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-42and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-44.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-48 and TireRotation on page 10-48.


10-50 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight to

slow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-37.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.


Vehicle Care 10-51

If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-48.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-43.


10-52 Vehicle Care

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-50 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-53

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-54 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-35. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only for

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

changing a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

level place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).


Vehicle Care 10-57

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The spare tire and tools are locatedin the storage compartment in therear of the vehicle.

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-8.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. If the vehicle has a subwooferassembly on top of the sparetire, remove it by turning thecenter retainer counterclockwise.

4. If the vehicle does not have asubwoofer, turn the retainercounterclockwise to remove thespare tire.

5. Remove the spare tire, jack, andtools and place them near thetire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-55.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


10-58 Vehicle Care

3. Place the jack at the positionmarked with a half circle.

4. Place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head of thejack to attach it.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise until the lift head isfirmly contacting the properlifting point nearest the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-59

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto fit underneath the wheel well.

7. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

8. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

9. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

10. Place the spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

11. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Turneach nut clockwise, by hand,until the wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench in acrisscross sequence, asshown.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Return the jack and tools to theiroriginal storage location.

2. Replace the trim cover.

3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, inthe rear storage compartment.

4. Attach one end of the strap to acargo tie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

5. Route the strap through thewheel, as shown.

6. Attach the other end of the strapto the other cargo tie-down inthe rear of the vehicle.

7. Tighten the strap.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the spare tire.

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10-61.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h

(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and thechains. Do not use tire chains onthe compact spare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-19.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Discharged Battery NegativeGrounding Point

2. Discharged Battery PositiveTerminal

3. Good Battery Negative Terminal

4. Good Battery Positive Terminal

The jump start negative groundingpoint (1) for the discharged batteryis the engine block or an enginemounting bolt. Connect to a spot asfar away from the dischargedbattery as possible.

The jump start positive terminal onthe discharged battery (2) is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle.

The jump start negative terminal (3)and positive terminal (4) are on thebattery of the vehicle providing thejump start.

The positive jump start connectionfor the discharged battery is under atrim cover. Open the cover toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park)with an automatic transmission,or Neutral with a manualtransmission.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-63

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point forthe discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not lash or hook tothe chassis componentsincluding the front and rearsubframes, suspension controlarms and links during towing andrecovery of a disabled vehicle orto secure the vehicle to a flatbedcar carrier. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the flatbed car carrier.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct

product usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed and

repaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishes


10-68 Vehicle Care

that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-11.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,


Vehicle Care 10-69

calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,

leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,

use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, and Other PlasticSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by a button-type retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock the retainers andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-74 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They have up‐to‐date tools and equipment for fastand accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-42.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-7.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-42.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-48.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-16.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON DIC message displays, havethe engine oil and filter changedwithin the next 1 000 km/600 mi.If driven under the best conditions,the engine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service

for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-48.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-7 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-12.

. Check engine cooling systemhoses and connections.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-16.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-67. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-21.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-42.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-48.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-10.

. Inspect brake system.



. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-67.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-22.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-67.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-20.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-20.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-21.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-21.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-16.



Additional Required Services

Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent

replacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.

Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.



(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve works properly,if the vehicle has one. Replace asneeded.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @ @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve works properly,if the vehicle has one. Replace asneeded.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-11.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspect



the shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-70 and Exterior Care onpage 10-67.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10-7.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-12.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299570, inCanada 19299571).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 95021102 —

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181

Spark Plugs 55585517 —

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95915125 —

Passenger Side – 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95915127 —

Rear – 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95915137 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelIf equipped, this label on the insideof the glove box, has the followinginformation:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt

Fuel Tank 53 L 14 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.4L L4 B Automatic 0.7 mm (0.028 in)

1.4L L4 8 Automatic 0.7 mm (0.028 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.4L L4 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20


13-2 Customer Information

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contactGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give theinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within



40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.

However, we recognize that despitethe good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13-5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13-5.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Buick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from09:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States and Canada

1-800-521-7300

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.buick.com

The Buick online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with Buick and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.buick.com to register yourvehicle.

Buick Owner Centre (Canada)buickowner.ca

Take a trip to the Buick OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.



. Find the Buick-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehicle limitedwarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.

Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0818.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedBuick dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.



This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Buickdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Buick dealer dueto scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.



. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestBuick dealership to repair thevehicle the same day, requiringthe vehicle to stay at thedealership for a night or more.If this happens, in addition to thepreviously listed services andprior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.



Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Buick dealer that isnearest to the temporary storagefacility for the disabled vehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0818

United States

1-866-466-8197

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Buick reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 6 years/110 000 km (70,000 mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside

Assistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,



unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to your

destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collision

repairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safety



performance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be

able to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13-7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13-11.



Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-28.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.



Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.



However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,



if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology in

GM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”


14-4 OnStar

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple, Androidand BlackBerry devices to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, press Q, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. In the U.S. see www.onstar.com

(U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. In Canada see www.onstar.ca(Canada) or call1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may prevent

service such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in English, French orSpanish. PressQ and ask anAdvisor. Advisors can speakEnglish, French or Spanish.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-47. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communications

cannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


OnStar 14-9

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 ofthe Info-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or other

materials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),


14-10 OnStar

“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAbout Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . ivAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-10Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-26AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

ArmrestFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-21Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-26Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-21

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48, 3-51Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-20, 9-26

Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivDual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Cooling System Messages . . .5-27Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-10

First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4


INDEX i-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-43Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Requirements, California . . . . .9-43System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-21

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22


i-6 INDEX

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lamps (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . 9-40Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


INDEX i-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-19

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-18Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-17

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-27Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Object Detection System . . . . .5-28Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-29Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12


i-8 INDEX

Mirrors (cont'd)Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-35Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-21

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-29Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


INDEX i-9

Power (cont'd)Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-38Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-35Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23


i-10 INDEX

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4

Seats (cont'd)Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-51

SecurityOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-17Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


INDEX i-11

Storage Areas (cont'd)Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-20, 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-44Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-43Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-64Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-28Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Triangle, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-36Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-31Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-18Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-21WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

2013 buick encore owner manual m

Documents